‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ‬

 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬

‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺳﺎﻣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻟﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻧﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ؟ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﺗﺗﺑﻠﻭﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻰ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺫ ﻳﻧﺩﺭ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﻧﻰ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻱ ﻟﻬﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺍﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺿﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺯﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﻙ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﻡ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﻡ ﺟﺩﺍ ً ﺍﻭ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﻅﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﻁﺭ ) ﻭﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺍﺟﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻳﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺯﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻓﺿﻼ ﻋﻥ ﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺟﻧﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺍﺿﻰ ﻭﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻝ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺟﺩ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ؟ ﻭﺍﻗﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﺭﺽ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﺧﺫ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺛﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻧﻔﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻓﺿﻼ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻛﺗﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺑﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺟﻧﻰ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺣﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺛﻧﺎء ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ ‪ :‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻣﺎﻧﺔ ﻫﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻬﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻻﻣﺎﻧﺔ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﻳﻖ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻭﺍﻗﺏ ﻭﺧﻳﻣﺔ ﻧﻔﺫ ﻣﺎﻻ ﻭﺟﻬﺩﺍ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺃ‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺭﻯ ﺭﺋﻳﺱ ﺍﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ‪) :‬ﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭء ﺍﻣﻳﻧﺎ ﺍﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺭﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻼ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻧﺟﻧﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻗﺩﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺭﻑ ﻋﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻝ ﻫﻳﺭﻭﺩﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺻﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻙ )ﺳﻳﺯﻭﻭﺳﺗﺭﻳﺱ(‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 1400‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﻋﻁﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻙ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺭﻩ ﺑﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺑﻘﺻﺩ ﻓﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺍﺋﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺎ ﺍﻏﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﺑﻔﻳﺿﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺃﻏﺭﻕ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺷﺄﺕ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﻁﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﻥ ) ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫ ﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﻡ ‪ Rope stretchers‬ﺍﻯ ﺷﺎﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻝ( ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺻﺣﺎﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺃ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺎ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ 120‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﺩﺧﻝ ﻫﻳﺭﻭﻥ )‪(Heron‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻧﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻓﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﺩﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺑﺩﺃﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻋﺻﺭ )ﺍﺭﺳﻁﻭﺛﻧﻳﺱ( ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻛﻧﺩﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺫﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺷﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻋﺻﺭ ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻁﻠﻳﻣﻭﺱ )‪ (165-85‬ﻣﻳﻼﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 360‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﺳﺎﻣﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﺗﺳﺎﻋﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﻓﻥ ﻭﻋﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺿﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺣﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﻁﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ‬
 ‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻳﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺟﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﺳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﺈﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺗﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻣﻅﻬﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻓﻰ ﺳﻁﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ )ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ( ‪،‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻳﺳﻣﻲ )ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ‪ (Setting out‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻋﻛﺱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﻫﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻛﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻓﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻻﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺑﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺳﻧﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺳﺎﻣﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻻ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‪(plane Surveying) :‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻬﻣﻝ ﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﻫﻣﺎﻝ ﻻ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 250‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻰ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺳﻣﺎﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪(Topographical Surveying ):‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻭﻋﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﺍﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 100000:1 ، 25000:1‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ )‪(Cadastral Surveying‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻬﻧﺎ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻻﻣﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﺭﺍﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺎﻑ ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻲ )ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﺎﻡ( ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 5000:1,2500:1‬ﺷﻛﻝ )‪ (1-1‬ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻙ ﺯﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﺗﺳﻣﻲ )ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ( ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ‪. 1000:1,500:1‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻅﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﻪ ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺍﺋﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻣﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﻳﻊ ﻭﺷﺭﺍء‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﺿﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺯﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻻﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﺩﻳﺳﻳﺔ )‪(Geodetic Surveying‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﻟﻸﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻯ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺷﺎﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺗﺎﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﺗﺑﻊ ﻁﺭﻗﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﺩﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻧﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻗﻠﻳﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻭﻻ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﺩﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺎ ً‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻰ ﻓﺭﻉ ﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺭﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻓﻧﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ ‪.Arial Photogrammetry‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻳﺩﺓ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻸﻗﺎﻟﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺳﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﺎﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺗﺷﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﻘﻌﺎﺕ ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻧﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺿﻼً ﻋﻥ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻫﻅﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺎ ً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ، 1914‬ﻓﺄﺧﺫﺕ ﺗﺳﺭﻉ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻘﺩﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺣﺳﻭﺳﺔ ‪،‬ﺇﺫ ﺑﺭﺯﺕ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ﻟﻸﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺳﻛﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍء ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﻋﺕ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺁﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺩﻭﺩ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﺭﻯ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺑﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺗﺟﻣﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻭ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﻗﻌﻪ ﻭﻣﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﺧﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻧﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﻰ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﻌﻘﻳﺩﺍ ً ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎﻗﻭﺭﻧﺕ ﺑﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻳﺔ ‪Marine Surveying:‬‬

‫ﻳﺧﺗﺹ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻳﺔ ‪،‬ﺗﻬﺗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﺟﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺃﻧﺗﺟﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻹﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻳﺔ ‪،‬ﻭﻻﺯﺍﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﺩﻭﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻼﺣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻯ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻠﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻥ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﻓﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺣﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻯ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺯﺭ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺑﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺣﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ ﻻﻯ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻰ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻻﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻸﺧﻁﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.5‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻳﺎ َ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎﺗﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺟﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻭﻝ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﻓﻰ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﺳﻣﻪ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻓﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﻓﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻧﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺷﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﻻﺗﻌﻭﻕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻧﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻫﻧﺎ ﺗﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﺗﺻﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﻼﻉ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺣﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻖ )ﺃﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻰ )ﺃﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ( ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﺻﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺳﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﺗﻭﺍءﻡ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺄﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻣﻭﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﻁﻳﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻧﺎ ﻻﺑﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺎ ﺑﺻﺩﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺑﺣﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻓﺈﻧﻧﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻳﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺎﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻭﺍﺣﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺷﻛﻠﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻧﺎ ﻧﻼﺣﻅ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻙ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺩ‬
‫‪- 4‬ﺧﻳﻁ ﺛﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ‬
‫‪-5‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫‪-6‬ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ )‪: (Range poles or Rods‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﻠﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻏﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻓﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺫﻱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺷﻌﺏ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ) ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ ( ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ) ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ( ﻋﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ) ﻣﻥ ‪ 20‬ﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 50‬ﺳﻡ ( ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻗﺏ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ ﻭﺃﺣﻳﺎﻧﺎ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻝ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻙ )‪: (Pins or Arrows‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ )‪ ( 40-20‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻗﻁﺭ )‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ (6‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺩﺑﺏ ﻟﻳﺳﻬﻝ‬
‫ﻏﺭﺳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﺭﻗﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺎ ) ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻙ ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻙ ﻓﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺩ )‪: (Pegs‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺿﻠﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ )‪ (30-20‬ﺳﻡ ‪.‬ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺩﺑﺏ ﻟﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻏﺭﺳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺩﻕ ﺑﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻭﻱ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ )‪-4‬‬
‫‪ (7‬ﺳﻡ ‪.‬ﺃﺣﻳﺎﻧﺎ ﻳﺩﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻭﻻﺫﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺿﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ )‪ 0.5‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ( 2‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ )‪ 10‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ( 30‬ﺳﻡ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺣﻳﺎﻧﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ )‪ ( 30×5×5‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻏﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ )‪:(Plumb Bob‬‬
 ‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ) ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺩﺑﺏ ( ﺗﺗﺩﻟﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﻁ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ ﻓﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ )ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻭﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ )‪: (Tape‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﻧﻲ )‪: (Linen Tape‬‬
‫ﻳﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺩﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﺳﻼﻙ ﺭﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﻧﺯ ﻭﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ )‪10‬ﻡ‪15 ،‬ﻡ ‪20 ،‬ﻡ‪25 ،‬ﻡ‪30 ،‬ﻡ ‪50 ،‬ﻡ ‪100 ،‬ﻡ ( ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﻳﻥ ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻻﺧﺭ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺩﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍﺗﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﻭﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺧﺷﻲ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻭﺑﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻝ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﻛﻣﺎﺷﻪ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺻﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻭﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﻧﻌﻪ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﻻﺫﻱ ) ‪(Steel tape‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﻥ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ )‪1‬ﻡ ‪2 ،‬ﻡ ‪5 ،‬ﻡ ‪10 ،‬ﻡ ‪20 ،‬ﻡ ‪،‬‬
‫‪25‬ﻡ ‪30 ،‬ﻡ ‪50 ،‬ﻡ ‪100 ،‬ﻡ ( ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ )‪ 0,5‬ﺇﻟﻲ ‪ ( 1‬ﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍﺗﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻧﻅﺭﺍ ﻟﺻﻼﺑﺗﻪ ﻭﻗﻠﺔ ﺗﻣﺩﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻧﻛﻣﺎﺷﻪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻭﺑﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻰ ﺛﻣﻧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﺃ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﻁﺣﻪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ) ‪: (Field Notebook‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﺭﻭﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﻣﻡ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ (‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
 ‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻭ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﺎﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻻﻧﻪ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺷﻳﻭﻋﺎ ً ﻓﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺻﻠﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻫﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻌﻪ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻪ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺙ ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﻣﺛﻠﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﻋﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻓﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺛﻠﺛﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ – ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪Chain :‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻣﺿﻲ ﺃﻫﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻥ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﻣﻥ ﻭﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺗﺩﻫﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻘﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺭﻱ ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻥ ﻭﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻓﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺿﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ )ﺷﻛﻝ ‪ (1 - 3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ 100‬ﻋﻘﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪ 20‬ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺑﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﺿﺗﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻣﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻼﺕ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺣﻘﻖ ﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻷﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻪ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﻡ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍﺗﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺣﻣﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻳﻑ ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺭﺓ ﻛﺟﺳﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﺧﺽ ﺛﻣﻧﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺻﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻧﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺛﻘﻠﻪ ﻭﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻔﺭﺩﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺛﻘﻠﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻛﺔ ‪: (Arrow) :‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺩ )‪: (Pags‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ )‪: (Range poles‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ )‪: (Tapes‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-6‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ ) ﺧﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ( )‪: (Plumb - bob‬‬ ‫‪-7‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﻹﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺑﺳﻁ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻋﻪ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻧﻘﻠﺔ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻫﺎ ﺧﻳﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻘﻝ ﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﺩﺭ ﻓﻧﺟﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ ﻳﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﻭﻳﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﻁ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻛﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻁﻭﻟﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻠﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻛﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺃﻯ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ) ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺟﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ) ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺙ ( ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ :‬ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻧﺛﺑﺕ ﻭﺗﺩﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ ﺃﺏ ﻭﻧﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﺻﻳﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻘﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺧﻠﻑ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺃ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ) ‪ ( 2 -1‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺏ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﻩ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺃ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺑﻳﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃ ‪ ،‬ﺏ ﻭﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺣﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﺟﻠﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻳﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻭﺑﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪.‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺃﺏ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ) ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ( ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ‪ :‬ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ 2 ،1‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺃ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺟﻠﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺃﺏ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ‪ :‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺻﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺣﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻰ ﻭﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﻁ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺷﺗﺭﻁ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻔﻰ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺯﺩﺣﺎﻣﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ‪،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺿﻠﻌﺎ ً ﻳﻛﺎﺩ ﻳﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺍ ً ﻭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺛﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺍﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻣﻛﻥ ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺭﺅﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻁﻭﺍﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﻋﻛﺳﻳﻳﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ )ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ (‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻰ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻯ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﻫﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻯ ﻟﻠﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺟﺭﺍء ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻔﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻟﻪ ‪،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺎﻡ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﺄﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻔﻰ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﺧﻁ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻓﻰ‬ ‫ﺃ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻛﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻠﻑ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺎء ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﻓﺿﻼ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺏ‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺎ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻗﻠﺕ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺛﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺕ‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﺛﺭﺕ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﻧﺎء ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺙ‪-‬‬

‫ﺳﺑﻖ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً ﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺭﻭﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻳﻣﻳﻧﺎ ﻭﻳﺳﺎﺭﺍ‪ً.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺭﺳﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﻭﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻛﺗﻔﺎء ﺑﺈﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻭﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺣﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﺭﺗﺏ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺑﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﻰ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﻭﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻠﺧﺹ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺃ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﻟﻠﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻣﺛﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻰ ‪ :‬ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﺩﺍء ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻁﻭﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺣﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻛﺭﻭﻛﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﺻﺩ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺷﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻻﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬

‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻯ ﺧﻁ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺭﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻧﺑﻐﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻣﻛﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ - :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺃ(‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭﺃﻭ )ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺗﺩﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﻳﻥ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻷﺣﺩ ﻗﺑﺿﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺛﻡ ﻧﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺏ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ )ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺧﺹ ﻧﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ )ﺃ ﺏ( ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ )ﺃ( ﺇﻟﻲ )ﺏ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺟﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﺳﻙ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻭﻳﺳﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ( ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﻳﺳﻣﻲ )ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ( ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻪ ‪10‬‬
‫ﺷﻭﻙ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ )ﺃ( ‪) ،‬ﺏ( ﺑﻭﺗﺩ ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻔﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ )ﺃ( ﻭﻳﺟﻠﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻓﺻﺎء ﺧﻠﻑ )ﺃ( ﻟﻳﺗﺳﻧﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻲ )ﺏ( ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻳﻣﻳﻧﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺳﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻲ ﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﻓﻲ )ﺏ( ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﻓﻲ )ﺃ( ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ )ﺃﺏ( ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺎ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺝ‪ (1‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺣﺗﻲ ﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺧﻠﻑ )ﺃ( ﻓﻳﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ )ﺃﺏ( ﻭﻳﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻐﺭﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺝ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻷﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻭﻳﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻗﺑﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺝ ﻓﻳﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺝ ﺩ‪ 1‬ﻣﺛﻼ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺩ( ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺷﻭﻛﺔ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻳﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺝ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻲ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺩ ﻭﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺯﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫)ﻫـ( ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﻛﺫﺍ ﺣﺗﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺗﺭ )ﺃﻱ ‪ 10‬ﺟﻧﺎﺯﻳﺭ( ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻳﺳﻠﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﺭ ﻭﻳﺭﺻﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﻗﻳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﻭﺩﻟﺕ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻙ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺎﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻵﺧﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺎﺯﻳﺭ ﻳﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﻛﺳﻭﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ )ﻗﺩ ﻧﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺷﻭﻙ ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ‪ 10‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺗﺭ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺳﻥ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺩﺍء ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﺧﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺗﺭﻭﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﻁ ﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻁﺭﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺗﺭ ‪ :‬ﻭﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻖ ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺣﺩﺭ ﻓﻳﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻭﻳﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺗﺭ ) ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ( ﺛﻡ ﻳﺷﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺃﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃ ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺣﺩ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ )ﺃ( ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻣﺳﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺧﻳﻁ ﻭﺛﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ ﻳﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺳﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ )ﺱ‪ ، (1‬ﻭﻳﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ) ‪ (1‬ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﺯء ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )ﺹ‪ (1‬ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ )‪ (2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺑﺩﺍ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ – ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻰ ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﺃ ﺏ = ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺱ ‪ +1‬ﺹ ‪ + 1‬ﻑ‪...... 1‬‬

‫ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ) ﺃ ( ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺏ( ﻧﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺃ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺱ ) ﻁﺭﺣﺔ ( ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺣﺔ = ‪ 5‬ﻡ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻥ ﺱ‪1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺹ ) ﻁﺭﺣﺔ (‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻥ ﺹ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺏ ) ﻁﺭﺣﺔ (‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﺃ ﺏ = ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﺃ ﺱ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﺱ‪ 1‬ﺹ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﺹ‪ 1‬ﻡ‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺻﻭﻓﺔ ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ( ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻘﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻡ‪ – 2‬ﻉ‬ ‫ﻑ=‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻑ = ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻡ = ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻉ= ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻑ = ﻡ ﺟﺗﺎ ﻫـ ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻡ = ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻫـ = ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ )ﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻰ (‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﺍﺭﺻﺎﺩ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻹﺻﻼﺣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻧﺣﻧﺎء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﺯﺍﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﺳﻭء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻻﻳﺗﻌﺩﻯ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻼﻓﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ )‪: (Geographical Or True Meridian‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺗﻪ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﺭﺻﺎﺩ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ )‪: (Magnetic Meridian‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺇﺑﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺫﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻝ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻁﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻵﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺑﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺧﻁ ﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﺳﻬﻡ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺗﻰ ) ﺍﻹﺣﺩﺍﺛﻰ (‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺭﺷﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﺳﺑﻖ ﻧﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻁﺎﺑﻘﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺣﺻﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺫﻛﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻓﻼﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺷﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﺭﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻧﺳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻁ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺻﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ )ﺍﻟﺿﻠﻊ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻓًﺎ ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ )ﺍﻟﺿﻠﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻓًﺎ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻧﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻣﺳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻧﺷﻳﻁﺔ (‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪)Plane Taple‬ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻧﺷﻳﻁﺔ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﺿﻠﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ ﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺎﻳﻧﺎﺳﺑﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻭﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ ﻻﺑﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﻰ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ‪ .....‬ﺍﻟﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ً ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻧﺷﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻧﺷﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻣﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻼﻧﺷﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻼﻧﺷﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺿﻠﻌﻬﺎ ‪60x45‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺩﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﻳﺎﻧﺎ ً ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﺍﺋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺛﻠﺛﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻫﻡ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻗﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻰ ‪ :‬ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻳﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺷﻌﺏ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺑﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺧﺎﺭﻳﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺃﺭﺟﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺻﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﻓﻪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻳﻣﻼء ﺑﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺩﺍﺩ ‪ :‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻁﺭﻓﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺭﺥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﺻﺩﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﺳﻛﻭﺑﻰ ﻓﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺳﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﺷﻳﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ‪.‬ﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﺑﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻧﻘﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ - -5‬ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﺣﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﻋﺎﻛﺳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 6‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻭﻫﻭ‪ :‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ - 7‬ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﻭﻫﻰ ‪ :‬ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻯ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ - 8‬ﺷﻭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﻭﺧﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻏﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ -9‬ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻗﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﺭﺓ ﺣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻭﻓﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ‪ :‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﺟﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻻﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻧﻰ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻧﺷﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺛﺑﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺻﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ( ﻭﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺑﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺩ ﺑﺧﺎﺻﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻫﻣﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺭﺻﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺻﺩﺍ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺃ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻯ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻷ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻘﺑﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﺭﺽ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺍ ً ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﻯ ﻋﻘﺑﺔ ﺗﻌﺗﺭﺽ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ )ﻡ( ﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺗﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻧﺳﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻯ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻣﺎﻳﻧﺎﻅﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ )ﻡ( ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺃ( ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﻡ( ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺃ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻡ ﺃ(ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺃ(ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺻﻭﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺻﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻓﻰ )ﺃ ﺏ ﺝ ﺩ ﻫـ(‬
‫‪ -9‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ )ﺃ ﺏ ﺝ ﺩ ﻫـ (ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻉ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ ‪ :‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ )ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ( ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎ ً ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺷﺭﻁﻳﻥ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭﻫﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﻫﻣﺎً‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺭﺻﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺍ ً ﻭﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎ ً ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺗﻳﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺩ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻓﻳﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪- -2‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺝ( ﻭﺃﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺝ‪ (1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺩ( ﺍﻯ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺝ( ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺩ( ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺩ‪. (1‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺝ ﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺣﺗﻼﻟﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺏ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺏ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﻪ ﻟﻠﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃ ‪ ،‬ﻫــ‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺩ ) ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭ ﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ( ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺏ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻧﺟﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺏ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻋﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺝ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺩ ﻭﻳﺣﻣﻼﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺻﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻛﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺷﺭﻁﻳﻥ ﻫﻣﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺩ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﺩﻗﻳﻖ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺑﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺇﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻔﺭﺽ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ )ﺝ ﺩ( ﻭﻟﻛﻰ ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ) ﺃ ﺏ ﺝ ﺩ ﻫـ (ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺎﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺝ( ﻭﺍﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺩ(‬
‫ﺃﻯ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ )ﺝ( ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ )ﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ )ﺝ ﺩ( ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺍ ﻭﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﺝ( ﺭﺻﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﻫـ( ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫـ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻫــ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﻫـ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺩ ﻭﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻫـ ﻓﻳﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺝ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻋﻳﻥ ﺗﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﻫـ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺃ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻪ ﺃ‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻫــ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﻻﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺃ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻳﺧﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻫـ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃ ﻗﻳﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺩ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻫﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﻭﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻓﺭﺱ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺩﺋﻧﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻭﺍﺋﻖ ﻻ ﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻳﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻛﻝ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺷﺗﺭﻁ ﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻓﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻔﺭﺽ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻉ ﻫﻭ )ﺃ ﺏ ﺝ ﺩ ﻫــ( ﻭﺑﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻫﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺝ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺝ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺩ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺝ ﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪-3‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺏ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺡ ﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺩ ﻭﺍﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺭﺻﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻫــ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺩ ﻫـ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪.‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺩﺳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ً ﻭﺇﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎ ً‬

‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺃﺧﺭ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ‪-:‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪:Reduced level‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ‪ :‬ﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ‪:Datum line‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺳﺏ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺑﻪ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺭ ) ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ (‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺑﻳﺭ ‪:B.M‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻑ ﺩﻗﻳﻖ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻠﻔﺕ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺻﺏ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺣﺗﻲ ﻳﺅﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺧﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ )‪ :Back sight (B.S‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ )‪ : (F.S‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ )‪ :Intermediate sight (I.S‬ﻫﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺃﺧﺫﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺧﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ) ‪ :Turning point (T.P‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻱ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ -:‬ﻫﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﻳﺎﻧﺎ ﻳﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺑﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ) ﻫﻧﺩﺳﻲ( ﻭﻗﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻫﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﺣﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺛﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ :4‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﻭﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻧﻛﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻫﻣﻳﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﺣﻳﺎﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻛﻥ ﻫﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺷﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺳﻛﻙ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺗﺳﺗﻠﺯﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﻳﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﺟﻠﻲ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺫﻛﺭ ﺷﺊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭﺍﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﺻﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﻗﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺩﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻳﻊ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﻋﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺩﻳﺳﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻷﺧﺫ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺋﺗﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻭﻟﻲ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺩ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﻓﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺛﻧﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺳﻡ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺗﻧﺯﻟﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﺳﻛﻭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺭﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﺳﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﻭء ﻭﺣﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻁﺭ ﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ‪Level‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻹﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺣﻭﻱ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺳﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺷﺎء ﷲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻡ )ﺭﻭﺑﻳﺭ( ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ) ﺃ ( ﻹﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻱ ) ﺏ ( ﺷﻛﻝ ) ‪. (1 - 6‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃ ‪ ،‬ﺏ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 100 ، 70‬ﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻧﻘﻳﺱ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻉ )ﺃ ﺏ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﺎﻷﺗﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻹﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻉ‪ ، 1‬ﻧﻘﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃ ‪ ،‬ﺩ‪ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻛﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻗﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﻟﺗﻛﻥ ﺭﻭﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﺧﺫ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻲ ﻭﻟﺗﻛﻥ ﺡ‪ 1‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﺅﺧﺭﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻧﺎء ﻋﻠﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺩ‪ 1‬ﻭﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺛﻧﺎء ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻧﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺎﺭ ﻭﻧﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩ‪ 1‬ﻭﺗﺄﺧﺫ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻲ ﻭﻟﺗﻛﻥ ﻕ‪ ،1‬ﻭﻧﺳﻣﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺇﻥ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻧﺣﺳﺏ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃ ‪ ،‬ﺩ‪ 1‬ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻉ‪ = 1‬ﺥ‪ – 1‬ﻕ‪1‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻧﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺩ‪ ، 1‬ﺩ‪ 2‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺛﻧﺎء ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔﺇﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺩﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻠﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺛﻭﺍﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪،‬ﻭﻛﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﻣﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﻧﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﺭﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺩ ﻟﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﺅﺧﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﻧﺷﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻟﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺩ‪ 2‬ﻭﻧﺄﺧﺫ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻓﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻉ‪ = 2‬ﺥ‪ – 2‬ﻕ‪2‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﻧﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺏ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃ ‪ ،‬ﺏ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻉ = ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺃﺧﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻉ ﺃ – ﺏ = ﻉ‪ + 1‬ﻉ‪+ 2‬ﻉ‪ .. + 3‬ﻉ ﻥ‬
‫= )ﺥ‪ + 1‬ﺥ‪ + 2‬ﺥ‪ ... + 3‬ﺥ ﻥ(‬
‫= )ﻕ‪ + 1‬ﻕ‪ + 2‬ﻕ‪ ... + 3‬ﻕ ﻥ(‬
‫= ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺧﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫= ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫‪ -9‬ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻌﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺑﺩﺃﻧﺎ ﻣﻧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎ ﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ(‬

‫ﺑﺩﺃﺕ ﻓﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ، 1840‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻧﺳﻰ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻪ ﻟﻭﻳﺯﻳﺩﺍﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺑﺩﺃﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻻﺗﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻰ ‪ 1849‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫‪ 1858‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻧﺟﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﻻﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 1913‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻰ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻣﺗﺭﻯ ‪ Photogrammetry‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺗﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻫﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Photo‬ﻭﻣﻌﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬
‫‪ Gramma‬ﻭﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫‪ Metroo‬ﻭﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻫﻭ) ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء(‬
‫ﻭﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺂﻟﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﻪ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻧﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻰ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻯ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻫﻅﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺻﻼﺣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺑﺣﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺑﺣﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺭﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻣﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺫ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺑﺄ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﺭﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻣﺎﻧﻰ "ﻓﺭﻧﻬﻡ ﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺭﻳﺗﺵ " ﺑﺎﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻣﺗﻠﻙ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻛﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ "‬
‫ﻭﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﻓﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﺭﻯ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺏ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻣﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺏ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺿﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻅﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻫﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺑﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻣﻭﺭﻓﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺿﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺻﺭﺍﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺣﺻﺭ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭﺍﻧﻰ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻻﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.7‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺑﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺱ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻫﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺱ ﻫﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻰ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
 ‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﺩﺳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻰ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺂﻟﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺩﺩﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺑﺂﻟﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻓﻘﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ‪ Vertical‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻰ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ‪ Obllque‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻰ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺎﺋﻼً ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﻖ ﻻﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﻖ ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻣﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻻﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﻘﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﺄﺛﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﻰ ء‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺍﺳﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻌﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 75 -60‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪،‬ﻭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ‪ 18x18‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻯ ‪ 21‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 100‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ ‪9x9‬ﺑﻭﺻﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻯ ‪ 15,24‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﺍ ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 122‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 20,000 :1‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 10,000 :1‬ﻭ ‪ 20,000 :1‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺩ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻛﺑﺭﻣﻥ ‪ 10,000 :1‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻯ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺷﻳﺎء ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻓﻛﺭﺓ ﻁﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻠﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻓﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻐﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺫﻟﻙ ﻻﻥ ﺍﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻳﺗﺯﺍﻳﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻻﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻓﺗﻐﻁﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻐﺭ ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ﺑﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻣﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺏ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺷﺗﺭﻁ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻯ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻯ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻻﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ‪ ، %60‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻯ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻻﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ . % 30‬ﻭﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺳﻳﻡ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻁﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺗﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺫﻫﺎﺑﺎ ً ﻭﻋﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺗﻛﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺟﻭء ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻗﻬﺎ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎً‪ :‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺎً‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺿﻰ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻯ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )‪ . ( % 60‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻯ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺑﺩ ﺇﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺎﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻔﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻳﻙ( ﻳﻛﻔﻰ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ . % 25- 20‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪. %50‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﻧﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻟﺷﻰء ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﺄ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪7500‬ﻗﺩﻡ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺣﻳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺑﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺔ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ :‬ﺗﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﻫﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻰ ﺿﻳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺛﻐﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺇﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﺳﺎ ‪ :‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻗﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﺎ ً ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺑﻖ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻰ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻳﻭﺿﻭﺡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻠﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻌﺎ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻳﻙ )ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭﺓ (‪Mosaic:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻳﻙ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻠﺻﻖ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻅﻬﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻣﻧﺎ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺯﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭﺳﻛﻭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﻭﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺑﺻﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺳﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻣﻧﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺑﺎﺩﺉ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ )ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ( ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺻﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﻪ ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺟﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻊ ﻭﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻭﺍﺣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺎ ً ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﻳﺿﺎﺣﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻻﻳﺿﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻫﻝ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﺗﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻠﻪ ﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﺭﺻﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺄﺗﻰ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻝ ‪Base‬‬
‫‪ Map‬ﺃﻯ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻣﻧﺫ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﻫﻧﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﻬﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻁﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻁﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻧﺷﺎﻫﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﻳﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻫﻧﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻰ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ ﻟﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺻﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻬﻭﻡ ﻧﺟﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺎﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻁﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺷﻔﻬﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻔﺳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺭﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎ ً ﻭﺯﻣﺎﻧﻳﺎ ً ﻭﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺗﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺛﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻓﻛﺭ ﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺔ ﺑﻛﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻧﺷﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻳﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻣﺛﻼ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺗﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﺛﻼً ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻣﻰ ﻭﺩﻗﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﺑﺳﻁ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ‪ :‬ﻫﻰ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻳﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻯ ﺃﺳﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻓﻘﻰ ﻣﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻣﺛﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺗﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺣﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻣﻭﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪ -‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻹﻳﺿﺎﺡ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻧﻭﺍﺣﻰ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺻﻼً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻻ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺿﻳﻖ ﺟﺩﺍ ً ﻻﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻭﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻﺗﻘﺗﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﺛﻼً ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺍﻛﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺟﻭﻡ ﻛﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻻﺗﻘﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﻘﺗﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻬﻣﺎ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﺗﺻﺭ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺻﺻﻳﻥ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎ ً ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺗﻔﻬﻡ ﺃﻯ ﺣﻘﻳﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ -‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﺗﺻﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﺑﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﺩ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺻﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻝ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﻋﻧﺻﺭﺍ ً ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ً ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﺯﻉ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺗﻣﻳﺎ ً ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﺎﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺻﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﻭﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻁﺎءﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﺟﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻯ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﺋﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺑﻖ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻯ ﻟﻸﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻯ ﻟﻸﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻭﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻻﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﺷﻳﺋﺎ ً ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺗﺻﺎﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻠﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻫﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻣﺎء ﺍﻹﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺗﻣﺎﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﻳﻭﺭﻭﻟﻭﺟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺩﻭﻟﻭﺟﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﺟﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺳﻛﺭﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﻬﻡ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﻓﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺟﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻫﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺗﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺳﻳﻠﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﺗﻐﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻋﺎﺭﻓﺎ ً ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻧﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺗﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺗﻪ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺩﺭﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻳﻑ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺑﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺟﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻧﺷﺄﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﻫﻰ ﻧﻭﺍﺡ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻧﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺟﺯء ﻣﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﻫﻡ ﺗﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺻﺭﺍ ً ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ً ﻓﻰ ﺣﻳﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﻓﻥ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻁﻼﻗﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺿﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﺷﻛﺎﻻ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻁﻼﻗﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﺟﺗﻧﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺭﻛﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻔﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﻬﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ ﻭﻣﻠﺧﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﻼﺻﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻧﻰ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻭﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻁﺭﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺙ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻬﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻡ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺗﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻧﻭﻋﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﺩﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺍﻛﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻭﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺇﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﺎ ً ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﻣﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﺎﺗﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻَ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺻﺩ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﺯﻉ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺑﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ، 500,000 :1‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻻﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻫﻡ ﻣﺎﻳﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻛﺑﺭﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻬﻣﻝ ﻣﺎﻻﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺗﻬﺎ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻷﻁﺎﻟﺳﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ‪ 25,000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ، 500,000 :1‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﻳﺯ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻰ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ‪ .‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻬﺗﻡ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪10,000 :1‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻳﺯ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻔﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﺽ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺿﺭﻯ ‪.‬ﻭﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻬﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻳﻑ ﺑﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻬﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺿﺭ ﺑﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎً‪ :‬ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﺗﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺯﺍﻳﺩ ﺇﻫﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺗﻪ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺎﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺇﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﺎﺗﻭﺿﺣﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﻫﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﺻﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻻ ﺍﻧﻧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﺭﺍ ً ﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
 ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻧﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﻪ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺿﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﻭﺭ ﻭﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺗﻔﻬﻡ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭﺍ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺇﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺭ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻣﻭﺭﻓﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻫﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻧﺻﺭ ﻫﻰ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﻼً ﻭﻧﻬﺎﺭﺍ ً ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻯ ﻭﻗﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻭﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻌﺗﻧﻰ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻭﻓﻰ ﺇﻗﻠﻳﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ َ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ‪......‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻣﺯﻳﺔ ﻻﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻛﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻡ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﻣﺩﻟﻭﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺗﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﻭﻧﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ ‪..‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻧﻭﻋﺎ ﻭﻛﻣﺎً‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻟﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻰ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺩﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺳﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻏﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺱ ﻫﻰ‬
 ‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﻰ ﺑﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻌﻛﺱ ﺑﺻﺩﻕ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻝ ْ‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻗ ْ‬
‫ﻓﻣﺛﻼً ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺗﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺣﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﻭﺩﻳﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻻﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺇﻥ ﻧﺿﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻹﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ :‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﻣﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﻠﻪ ﺃﻧﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺣﺟﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﻗﺭﺃﺗﻪ ﻭﻻ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻁﻐﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻳﺷﻭﻩ ﻣﻧﻅﺭﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻳﺳﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ )ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ (‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻏﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻗﺭﺃﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻣﺎﺗﻣﺛﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﺑﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﻫﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻯ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﺳﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻳﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﻛﻣﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﻛﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺿﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺧﺭﻓﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺟﺫﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺗﺑﺎﻩ ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺿﺭ ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺑﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺑﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻳﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﺭﻛﻥ ﺃﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻧﺑﻐﻰ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺧﻁ ﺳﻣﻳﻙ ﻧﻭﻋﺎ ً ﻣﺎ ) ﻟﻳﺱ ﻓﻰ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ( ﻋﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻋﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺗﻪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺍ ً‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺷﺎﻣﻼً ﻟﻠﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﻭﺿﺣﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻭﺭﺩﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻗﺑﺔ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻭﻧﻪ ﻓﻔﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻅﻠﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻼﺕ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺟﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻌﻳﺵ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻪ ﺑﺩﻗﻪ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻳﺄﺧﺫ ﺷﻛﻼً ﻟﻳﺱ ﻛﺭﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺗﻭﺍﺋﻰ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﻣﺳﺎﻗﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ‪ POINT OF REFRANCE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ً ﻣﺎﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻫﻰ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻅﺎﻣﻰ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻹﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻹﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻹﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻹﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻧﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻣﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﻋﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺗﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺏ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻔﺭ )ﺧﻁ ﺟﺭﻧﺑﺗﺵ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻧﺟﻠﺗﺭﺍ( ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ 180‬ﺷﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺭﺏ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺗﻼﻗﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻣﻳﺗﻰ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﻥ ‪.‬ﻭﺗﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ‪ ) 180‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ (ﻫﻰ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪ : Latitude‬ﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ 90‬ﻓﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻳﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻥ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﻫﻭ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺑﻠﻎ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﺧﺭﻯ ‪ 111,2‬ﻛﻡ ﻭﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 111.77‬ﻛﻡ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻔﻠﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺑﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺭ ‪1 ،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 110.57‬ﻛﻡ ﻭﻳﺑﻠﻎ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ 1852‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻯ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎء ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻗﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺑﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺭﺳﻡ ﺳﻬﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ) ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ ( ﻭﺍﺣﻳﺎﻧﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺭﺳﻡ ﺳﻬﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺭ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺳﻛﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻐﻧﺎء ﻋﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻬﻡ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻣﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﺫﺍﻙ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺎﻣﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ) ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻁﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ( ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﻓﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻧﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ )ﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء (‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺟﻧﻭﺏ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﻓﺗﻛﺗﺏ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ )ﺟﻧﻭﺏ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء ( ﻣﻊ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﻏﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ) ﺷﺭﻕ ﺟﺭﻧﻳﺗﺵ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺭﻳﻧﺗﺵ )ﺃﻭ ﺧﻁ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺭ ( ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻏﺭﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻓﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻕ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ )ﻏﺭﺏ ﺟﺭﻳﻧﺗﺵ(‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﺗﻔﻰ ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺗﺣﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺻﻣﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻭﺩ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﺑﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﺭﻓﻳﻌﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻓﺭﺍﻍ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺛﻼً ﻋﺷﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺍﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻼﺕ ﺭﻓﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻁﻣﺱ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺑﺳﻁ ﺍﺷﻛﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﻳﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻠﻠﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻟﻼﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻛﺗﺏ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻟﻼﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻣﻳﻙ ﻧﺳﺑﻳﺎ ﻭﻣﺗﺻﻼ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻗﻁﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺕ ﻟﻠﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻭﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻁﺎﺭﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺳﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻁﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺿﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻁﺎﺭ ﺿﻳﻖ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺭﻓﻳﻌﺎ ﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺗﻪ ﻛﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺳﻣﻳﻛﺎ ﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻠﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻣﻭﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﺍ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺑﺭﺍﺯﻩ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺻﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫‪.‬ﻓﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﺛﻼ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻛﺔ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻏﻳﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﺎﻧﻧﺎ ﻧﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﻧﺎ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻫﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻕ ﻫﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺏ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﻫﻰ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻧﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻻﺗﻘﺗﺻﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻯ ﻣﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﺧﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻯ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﺛﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﺛﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺷﻭﺍﺭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬ﺑﻝ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻟﺔ ‪....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﺻﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻧﺟﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺻﺩﺭﺕ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺣﺳﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻳﺳﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺻﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺷﻭﺍﺭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻯ ‪ ...‬ﻓﺎﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻥ ﺗﺧﻠﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺻﻣﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺷﻛﻠﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﺗﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﻛﺗﺏ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﺗﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﻛﺗﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﻘﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ﻻﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺎﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻰ ﻣﺛﻼ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺭﻓﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻧﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻳﻐﻠﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻰ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻯ ﺷﻰء ﺁﺧﺭ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ – ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩﺍ ً‬
‫ﻟﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻔﻳﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺿﻁﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻁﻼﺡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺿﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺭﻣﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﺧﺭ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻧﺫﻛﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺑﻳﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﺣﺑﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﺎﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺭﺟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ‪ :‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﻳﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﺎ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻣﻳﻼً ﺧﻔﻳﻔﺎ ً ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﻪ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻳﺭﻓﻊ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺎ ً ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﻟﻠﻭﺭﻕ ﺧﻔﻳﻔﺎ ً ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﻁﺎء ﺧﻁ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻳﺟﻑ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻛﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺟﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﻻﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﻣﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻧﺻﺎﻑ ﺍﻗﻁﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻛﺗﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺭﻏﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺣﺎﺓ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺣﺎﺓ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻﺗﺧﺩﺵ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪. HB2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪: Scale‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺻﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻳﻝ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺭﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻣﺎﻳﺳﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻌﻁﻰ ﺗﺻﻭﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻧﺳﺏ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻛﻳﻑ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﻧﺎءﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺗﻔﻖ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻏﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩﻳﺔ ‪ Numerical Scales‬ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺩﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪: Direct Statement Scale‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺃﺑﺳﻁ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ "ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﻳﺗﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ‪ 3‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ " ﺃﻭ ﻧﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻳﻝ "‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ ..‬ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭﻯ ‪:Fractional Scale‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻳﻪ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺇﻋﺗﻳﺎﺩﻯ ﺑﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻣﻪ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬
‫‪25000‬‬ ‫‪1000‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻛﻡ ﺍﻭﻣﻳﻝ ( ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻯ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻯ ‪ 10000‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 25000‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ‪ 4‬ﺳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻯ ‪ 40000‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺛﻼ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻯ ‪ 400‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺝ ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻰ ‪Proportional Scale‬‬

‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻁ ﻭﻗﺩﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻰ ﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ .‬ﻓﻳﻘﺎﻝ ‪ 20000 : 1‬ﺃﻯ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 20000‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻰ ‪ Graphical Scale‬ﻭﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻘﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻣﺟﻬﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.‬ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ‪: Simple Linear Scale‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻻً ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻳﺎﻝ( ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ً ﻭﻳﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺑﺎﻛﺑﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻧﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺎ ‪ ، 100000 :1‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺧﻁﻰ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻳﻘﻳﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻳﻠﻭﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻑ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﻰ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﻪ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻝ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ‪ 100,000‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺃﻯ ﺃﻥ ‪1‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ‪1000‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ‪1‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ ‪Graphic or Rode Scale‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺿﺎﻓﺎ ً ﺍﻟﻳﻪ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺗﻪ )ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺭ( ﻭﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺻﻐﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺃﺿﻳﻔﺕ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻟﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻧﺑﻐﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﻥ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺩﻗﺗﻪ ﺭﺑﻊ ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺃﻭ ‪ 250‬ﻣﺗﺭ ‪،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻅﺭﺍ ً ﻟﺻﻐﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻰ ‪Diagonal Scale‬‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻳﺱ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻭ ﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺧﻁﻰ ﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ 400,000 :1‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻘﺭﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺗﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻳﻼﺣﻅ ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ‪1‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ .‬ﺃﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻳﻣﺛﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻓﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻅﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺛﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻼﺣﻅ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺙ ﺃ ﺃﺏ ﺝ ﻳﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺙ ﺃ ﺱ ﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻠﻊ ﺃ ﺝ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻯ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺃﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺛﻳﻥ ﻛﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ 10 :1‬ﻭﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻘﻳﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ 400,000 :1‬ﻧﺟﺭﻯ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﺧﻁﻳﺎ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺎ ً ﺛﻡ ﻧﺿﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﺧﻁﻳﺎ ً ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ‪1‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ‪400,000‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻯ ﻛﻝ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ‪ 4‬ﻛﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺱ ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ‪ 5‬ﻛﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬

‫‪1x5‬‬
‫= ‪ 1,25‬ﺳﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻰ = ـــــــــــــ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﻛﻝ ‪ 1,25‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ‪ 5‬ﻛﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﻧﺄﺧﺫ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪ 1,25‬ﺳﻡ = ‪ 5‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺭ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺿﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ‪ 1,25‬ﺳﻡ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﻧﻘﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻗﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ =‬
‫ﺍﻛﻡ ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺣﺻﻠﻧﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻰ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺗﺭ ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻧﻧﺎ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﺻﻐﺭ ﻗﺳﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ‬
‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ =‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ =‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‬

‫‪ 10 = 1000/100‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ‪ 10‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻼ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﻭﺻﻝ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺭ ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺎ ﻧﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺑﻌﺩﺍ ً ﻗﺩﺭﻩ ‪ 12,7‬ﻛﻡ ﻓﺎﻧﻧﺎ ﻧﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﻧﺿﻊ ﺍﺣﺩ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻁﺭﻓﻪ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ‪: Comparative Scale‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁﻰ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﺷﺑﻛﻳﺎ ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺷﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺳﺑﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺗﻳﻥ ‪ :‬ﻓﻔﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻳﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ‪ .‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺟﻬﺗﻳﻪ ﺗﻘﻳﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺟﺯﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻘﻳﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻳﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﺟﺯﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺭﻯء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻧﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺔ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻼً ﻋﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺷﺄ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﻰ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺻﻔﺭ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻰ ‪: Time Scale‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﻪ ﻻﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻁﻼﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺵ ﻓﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺳﻳﺭﻫﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻌﻬﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ‪.‬ﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻳﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﻣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ً ﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻟﻠﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﺃﺻﻐﺭﻫﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺟﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﻧﺻﺎﺩﻑ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺟﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻯ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺄﺗﻰ ﺑﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻧﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻣﺛﻠﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻁﺭﻕ ‪ ....‬ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺗﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﻭﻟﺔ‬

‫ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﻭﻟﺔ = ـــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ ‪ x‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺟﻬﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺟﺩﻧﺎ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ‪. 25000 :1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺣﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺩﻓﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺗﻳﻥ ‪ .‬ﻓﻛﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﻭﻟﺔ ‪ 15‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ‪ 18‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﻭﻟﺔ =‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬

‫= ــــــــــــــ‬ ‫ــــــــــــ‬ ‫ــــــــــــ‬
‫‪30000‬‬ ‫‪25000‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬

 ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻭﺍﺟﻬﻧﺎ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻯ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻼً ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎ ً ﻭﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺇﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻻﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﺗﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺩﻳﻧﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﻌﺎﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﻔﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﻳﻥ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻻﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻰ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻳﻧﺗﻳﻥ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-1‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﺫﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﻥ ﻣﺩﺑﺑﻳﻥ )ﻓﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ (‬ ‫‪-2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ‬ ‫‪-3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-4‬‬
‫ﻋﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻰ ﺃﺑﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﺔ ‪ .‬ﻓﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﺛﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺟﺎﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺫﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﻥ ﻣﺩﺑﺑﻳﻥ )ﻓﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ( ‪ Divider‬ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﻟﺗﻛﻥ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﻳﺗﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻵﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﺣﺳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﻘﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻧﺿﺭﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﺳﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺧﻳﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﻟﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﻻﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﻭﺩﻳﺔ ‪،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺛﻡ ﻧﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺑﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺗﺗﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺛﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻧﺎﻳﺎﻩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﺭﻯ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﺳﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻳﺎﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ ﻣﻐﻠﻑ ﺑﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻳﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﺭﺱ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻧﻥ ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﺟﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻳﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻼﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻊ ﺗﻘﻳﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻣﻳﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺻﻪ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺭ ﻳﻘﻳﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻳﻠﻭﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺳﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭ ‪/‬ﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺟﻠﺔ ﻧﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻵﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪ -‬ﻧﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻧﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻻﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﻥ ﻳﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﺛﻡ ﻧﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﻭﻧﻘﺭﺃ ﻣﺄﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻳﻠﻭﻣﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﺗﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﺃﻣﻳﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻣﻳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺛﻡ ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻹﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻫﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻁﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻘﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ x‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻑ‬
‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺙ =‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ = ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﺳﻣﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻼﻧﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺳﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻭﻧﺿﺭﺏ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻐﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺳﻣﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻼﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ ﺛﻡ ﻧﻧﺻﻔﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺛﻠﺙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺣﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻧﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ) ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ ( ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﻳﺷﺎﺑﻬﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺛﻠﺙ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬

‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ x‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ‬

‫ــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــــ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺩﻩ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻧﻳﻣﻳﺗﺭ ‪Planimetre‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻯ)ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻰ ( ﻭﺍﻵﻟﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻧﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﻳﻥ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻳﺩﻋﻰ ﺯﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ ﺯﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺛﺎﻧﻭﻳﺔ ) ‪ 10‬ﺍﻗﺳﺎﻡ‬
‫(ﻭﻳﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ )ﺍ( ﺑﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻑ )ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺍﺳﻡ (ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﻠﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ )ﺏ(ﻳﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺗﻪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺳﻡ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻﺗﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺣﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺳﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺗﻪ ﺑﻛﻝ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ ً ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬
 ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻭ ﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺟﻬﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻣﺛﻼ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﺎﻟﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺻﺩ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺣﺔ ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺭﺳﻣﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺻﻠﺢ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺄﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺑﻬﺎ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻫﻰ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻑ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺗﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻑ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺟﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺡ ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻰ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻷﻯ ﺿﻭء ﻛﺎﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺿﻭء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺭﺑﻭﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺿﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻛﺭﺑﻭﻥ ﻗﺩﻳﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻﻳﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﺛﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺎ ً ﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺑﻭﻥ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺳﻥ ﻗﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻠﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﺩﺑﺏ ﻳﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻷﺻﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺑﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠﻔﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻗﻠﻡ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺧﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺳﺑﻳﺎ ً ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺣﺳﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺩ ﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎ ً ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ )ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ( ﻟﻠﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻅﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
 ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻁﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻯ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻬﺎﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ 1:3‬ﻓﺎﻧﻧﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺿﻠﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ ‪ 3‬ﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺳﻡ ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻅﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻣﺎ ﺗﺟﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ( ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪ 1:2‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ‪ 14‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺍﺗﺑﻌﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻧﻧﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺎ ﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻧﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪) 3:1‬ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ( ﻓﺈﻧﻧﺎ ﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻠﻊ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﻛﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺃﺿﻼﻋﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻣﺛﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻯ ‪ 3‬ﺳﻡ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻅﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺧﺗﺻﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺎ ﻻﻧﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺁﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺑﻳﺩﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻛﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺎﻗﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ )ﺃ ﺏ( ﻭ )ﺝ ﺩ( ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﺩﺑﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﻭﺳﻁ ﻛﻠﻳﻬﻣﺎ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﻬﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻰ ﻭﺳﻁﻬﺎ ﺛﻘﺏ ﻳﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﺣﻭﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻣﻛﺗﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ) ‪ ،(Lines‬ﻭﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ) ‪ ، (Circles‬ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ ) ‪ ، (Plans‬ﻭﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ) ‪ (Solids‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼً ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻛﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻻﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺃﻡ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭﻫﺎ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺗﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﺗﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻑ ‪Pantograph :‬‬

‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﺻﻠﻳﺎ َ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ‪ .‬ﻛﻝ ﺿﻠﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺭﻛﺗﻪ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻗﺎﻥ ﻣﺩﺭﺟﺎﻥ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﺎ ً ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺍ ً ﺑﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺄﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻗﻠﻡ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺳﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺏ ) ﻗﻠﻡ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ( ﻓﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﻧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺑﺏ ﺝ ﺛﻡ ﻧﺣﺭﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺷﻛﻼً ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻼً ﻟﻸﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺍ ً ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺍ ً ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻁﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻘﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺯﺩﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺩﻟﻭﻻﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﻭﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ ﺑﺷﺭﻯ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﻭﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻧﺟﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻵﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ) ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺎﺕ (‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻫﻣﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻧﺎ ﻓﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺿﻼً ﻋﻥ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺿﺎﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﻭﺣﻰ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﻫﻝ ﻫﻰ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺷﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ﻭﻣﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻣﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻓﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺿﺎء )ﺳﻭﺍء ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺿﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻝ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻧﺎ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁﻬﺎ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺳﻁﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺿﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻧﺎ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺗﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﺃﻯ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺭﻣﺯﻳﺔ )ﻭﻫﻣﻳﺔ ( ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺗﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺃﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺑﺎ ً ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ) ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﻪ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ ( ﻓﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺑﻬﺎ )ﺃﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺩﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ( ﻻﺗﺩﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻰء‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻧﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﻠﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻭﺁﺧﺭ ﻳﻠﻳﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻅﻼﻝ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ) ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻁﺎﻟﺱ ( ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﻐﻠﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺣﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺋﻼً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺩﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻻﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺍﻓﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻳﻌﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﻭﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺭﻓﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﻁﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﻧﻘﻁ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺗﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﻘﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺷﺎﺋﺵ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﻘﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﻠﻭ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺷﺭﻁ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﺎﺋﺵ ﻓﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺅﻟﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻼﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻧﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻭﺑﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﻣﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺿﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻏﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺧﻳﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﻭﺯﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﻯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻯ ﻓﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ﻳﺗﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺇﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺳﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺧﺎﺹ ) ﻭﻟﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ( ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺃﻫﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻛﻭﻣﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻻﻫﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻅﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻧﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺗﺭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺟﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻌﻠﻭﻫﺎ ﻫﻼﻝ ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﺭ ﻓﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺗﻣﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻓﻣﻘﺎﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﻣﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ ﺑﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ ﺷﺭﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺳﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺑﺎﺭﻯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺧﻁ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺭﻓﻳﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﺑﺧﻁ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺛﻘﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﺑﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺇﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻑ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻭﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﻔﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﻳﻥ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﻳﻥ ﻳﻘﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻻ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﻁﺭ ﻓﻳﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺧﻁ ﺳﻣﻳﻙ ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﻳﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﻷﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﻓﺭﻭﻋﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﻁﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﻧﺎﻁﺭ ﺍﺩﻓﻳﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻯ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺑﺄﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺻﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻰ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﻌﺑﺩﺓ ﻭﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺭﺻﻭﻓﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﺭﻓﻳﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﺭﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻭﺿﺣﻬﺎ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻁﺎﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺷﺭﻁ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺭﻓﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺷﺭﻁ ﺭﻓﻳﻌﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺳﻧﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻁ ﻭﻳﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺎﺕ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻁ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺣﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﻁ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺗﻪ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻳﻘﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﺑﻪ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺿﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺿﺎﺏ ﻭﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﺽ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﻣﺩ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺗﻪ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻳﻌﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﻠﻌﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻳﺗﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﺎﺗﺭﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺭﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻷﺧﺭ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻯ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﻟﻧﺎ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺗﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻼﻝ ﺑﻝ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻧﻣﻁﺎ ﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻧﺷﺄ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩﻳﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺣﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺣﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺑﺭﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻠﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺷﺭﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺣﻘﻘﺕ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻠﻘﻰ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻَ ‪ :‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺩﻟﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺳﻰ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻯ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ ‪.‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﻛﻝ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺑﺩء ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻯ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻁﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻧﻘﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻓﻰ ﺷﺗﻰ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻁﻳﻧﺎ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﺍ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺎ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﻌﻁﻳﻧﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺗﺿﺭﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻓﻼﻳﻣﻛﻧﻧﺎ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻫﺩﻓﺎ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺑﺭﺍﺯ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺎ‪ :‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺷﻭﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺷﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻟﻣﺎﻧﻰ " ﻟﻳﻣﺎﻥ "‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1730‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺑﻳﺽ ﻻﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺧﺫ ﻅﻼﻻً ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﻧﺣﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻰ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻰ ﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﻭﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﺛﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌﺎ ﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻭﺗﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﻭﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻰ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﻝ ﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﻣﻛﺎ ﻭﻗﺻﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺯﺩﺣﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬ﻭﻳﻧﻌﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻗﻣﺔ ﺟﺑﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺩﻯ‬
‫ﻓﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻬﺷﻳﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺷﻭﺭ ﻧﻭﻋﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺗﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺱ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻳﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻰ ﺩﻗﻳﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺳﺑﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫‪.‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺑﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ، 1779‬ﻭﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻫﻭ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻳﻣﺭ ﻭﻳﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﺗﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻋﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺛﻧﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺎﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺻﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻻﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻐﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺿﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﻟﻧﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺿﻣﻪ ﺧﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﺻﻔﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻻﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺳﺎﻭﻯ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺧﻁ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺷﺗﺭﻁ ﺇﻥ ﻧﺟﺩ ﻧﻘﻁ ﻳﺗﻔﻖ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺗﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ‬
‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺎﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻻﻳﺗﻔﻖ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺟﺭﺍء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺱ ) ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﻟﺑﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﻲ ‪ :‬ﻓﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺻﻐﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺫﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻠﻰ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻧﺳﺑﻳﺎً‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﺑﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﺎﺟﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻋﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻻﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻛﻔﻰ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﻧﺎ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺯﺩﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﺗﻼﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺯﺣﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻣﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻋﻛﺳﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻓﺗﺻﻐﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺗﻪ ﻻﻥ ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺧﻔﺎء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺿﺎﺭﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺗﺏ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﻧﺎ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺿﻁﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺑﻰ ﺍﻯ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁﻰ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻯ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﺧﻁﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺍً ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺍﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺧﻁﺎ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺗﻔﺭﻉ ﺧﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻁﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺍﻯ ﺧﻁ ﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻧﺗﻭﺭ ﺍﻻ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﻭﻑ ﻓﻘﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺗﺯﺍﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺗﻪ ﺑﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺗﻪ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪Geographical Information System :‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪Remote Sensing :‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﻻَ ‪ :‬ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪Geographical Information System :‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺣﺛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺩﻳﻧﺟﺭﻣﻭﻧﺩ ‪ Dangermond‬ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻌﺭﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﻭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍ ً ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻠﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺻﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻭﺍﻯ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ‪ Geographical Information System GIS :‬ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ ‪Geographical‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻰ ﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺧﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺣﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪:Information‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺻﺩ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺟﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ : System‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺳﺋﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺁﻟﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻭﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺫﻫﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ GIS‬ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ )ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻬﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺩﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻹﺛﺭﺍء ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪Geography Data Base‬‬
‫ﻓﻣﻧﺫ ﻧﺟﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺳﺗﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺿﻰ ﺃﺧﺫﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻣﺳﻠﻛﺎ ً ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺎ ً ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻵﻟﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺩﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻭﻗﺕ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﻗﻣﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺳﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺳﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻣﻛﻧﻧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻔﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺑﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻘﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺟﺭ ﻁﻣﺳﻭﻥ ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﻣﺎﻳﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺻﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺷﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﻭﻋﻣﺭﺍﻧﻳﺎ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺿﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻫﻳﺋﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻠﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﻧﺷﻰء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻝ ‪ Analyst‬ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁﺔ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻁﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻼ ﺑﻳﻧﻪ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻁﻰ ﻟﻣﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺭﺻﺔ ﻟﻛﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺋﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ GIS‬ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ‪،‬ﺃﻥ ‪ GIS‬ﻫﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻧﻭﻟﻭﺟﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻛﻰ ﺗﺅﺩﻯ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻻﺑﺩ ﺇﻥ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻵﻟﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻹﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﺭﺿﻰ )‪ (Georefernce ed‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺻﺻﻭﻥ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻫﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪Input‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪Sorting‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ‪Manipulation‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ‪Output‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫ﻭﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻰ‬
‫‪ Scanning‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻬﻭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺿﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺎﺕ ) ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ (‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻧﺣﺗﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫ﺛﻡ ﻧﺄﺗﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ‪Mainpulation‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﻌﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻬﻣﻧﺎ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻭﻫﻭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁﻳﺔ ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺗﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻫﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ )ﺑﻺﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ (‪.‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ َ ‪:‬ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪Remote Sensing:‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻁﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺗﻔﺳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻬﺎﺭﺍ ً ﺃﻭ ﻟﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻭ ﻋﻠﻡ ﻭﻓﻥ ﺍﻣﺗﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺷﻳﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ ﻣﻌﻬﻣﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻌﻛﺳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﻌﺛﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺇﻥ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻣﺩﺍﺩﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻧﻧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﻣﺣﺳﺎﺕ ‪ SENSOR‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻓﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻳﻛﻣﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻳﻧﺣﺻﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻳﻥ ﻫﻣﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻔﺳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺛﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺿﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ‪Resolution‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻣﺣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺿﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺎﺕ ) ‪ (Edge Enhancments‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻵﻟﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺃﺩﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻻﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬

‫‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ )‪ (AutoCAD‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻗﻭﻱ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻧﺫ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﻩ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻭﻓﻣﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ‪1982‬ﻡ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﻣﺑﻳﻌﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻧﻘﺩﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 2002‬ﺑﺣﻠﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻁﻳﺎﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﻣﻧﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﻓﻘﻧﺎ ﷲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﺣﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﻳﺎ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﻧﻧﺎﻗﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺱ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻓﺗﺢ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻓﺗﺢ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﻋﻣﻠﻙ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‬

‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Startup‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻙ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﺊ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﺊ ﺭﺳﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺑﻧﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ )ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪ DWT‬ﻭﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻳﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻭﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻧﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺷﺎء ﷲ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﺊ ﺭﺳﻣﺎ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﺭﺳﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.al-salami.com/learn/auto%20cad/s1-1.jpeg‬‬

‫§ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪ New‬ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪Standard‬‬

‫‪§ File > New‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ NEW‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ‪Enter.‬‬

‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ‪ Create New Drawing‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻡ ‪ Feet‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪ ( Inch‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻳﺔ ))‪Meter, Millimeter‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﻧﺷﺎء ﺭﺳﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪:‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻻﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ‪Quick Setup‬‬

‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ Units‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪)Area‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬

‫§ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ ‪Advanced Setup‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ )ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪:‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺔ‪) Units‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﺭﻳﺔ(‬

‫‪ v‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪) Angle‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﻭﺭ(‬

‫‪ v‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺻﻔﺭ ‪ ( Angle Measure (East, North, West, South, Other‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ Other‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺑﻙ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ ‪ ) Angle Direction‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻛﺱ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ (‬

‫‪ v‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪Area.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Finish.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻌﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ Us a Template‬ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎ ﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻗﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺑﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺑﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ Browse‬ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ‪-:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪Titl Bar‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺋﻡ ‪Menu Bar‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪Toolbars‬‬

‫‪ .4‬ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪Drawing Window‬‬

‫‪ .5‬ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺭ ‪Command Window‬‬

‫‪ .6‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪Status Bar‬‬

 ‫‪1‬ــ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪: Titl Bar‬‬

‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ 2002AutoCAD‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ــ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪:Menu Bar‬‬

‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻙ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺻﻭﻻ ﺳﻬﻼ ﻟﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﻳﻧﺩﻭﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻧﺗﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺳﺗﺟﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ File‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﺗﺟﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Draw .‬‬
 ‫‪3‬ــ ﺍﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪:Toolbars‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ . Standard‬ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ‪Object‬‬
‫‪ ، Properties‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪ ، Draw‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪ ، Modify‬ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ‪ 26‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ View > Toolbars :‬ﺛﻡ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ ، Toolbars‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ ACAD‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Menu Group‬ﻭﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪4‬ــ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻝ ﺍﻛﺑﺭ ﺣﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺑﻙ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺈﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪Tools > :‬‬
‫‪Options > Display > Window Elemen‬‬

‫‪5‬ــ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﺭﻯ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼ ﻟﻭ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ Line‬ﺛﻡ ‪ Enter‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺭﻯ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﻳﻁﺎﻟﺑﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﺹ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ‪Tools -:‬‬
‫‪> Options > Display > Window Element‬‬

‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺑﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪Text Lines In Commend Line Window‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻓﻣﻥ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ Color‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻧﺑﺛﻖ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﺩﻟﺔ ﻟـ ‪Window‬‬
‫‪ Element‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Commend Line Background‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ‪.Commend Line Text‬‬

‫‪6‬ــ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻭﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ‪ X,Y,Z‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ‪ Snap Mode‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Grid‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩ ‪ Ortho‬ﻭﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ‬
‫‪ Polar Tracking‬ﻭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Object Snap‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ‬
‫ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ‪ Lineweights‬ﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ Model Space‬ﺃﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ .Paper Space‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ UCS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻬﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻣﺛﻼ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪ Y‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻣﺛﻼ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪ X،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
 ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪View > Display > Ucs Icon > Properties‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ +‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺑﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ Picbox‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻛﺗﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﻁ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ Line‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺛﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻧﻘﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ Copy‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﻭﻳﺑﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ Model‬ﻭ ‪:Layout‬‬

‫ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺷﻳﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ Model‬ﻭ ‪ Layout‬ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ Model‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺳﻧﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ‪ Layout‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻓﻳﻛﻥ ‪ 1Layout‬ﻭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﻓﻠﻳﻛﻥ ‪ 2Layout‬ﻭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻓﻠﻳﻛﻥ ‪ 3Layout‬ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ‪:‬‬

‫‪Tools > Options > Display > Layout Elements > Display Layout And Model Tabs‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻙ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻻﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻭﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻧﻘﺭﺕ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﻳﺎﻕ ‪ ،context sensitive‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪-:‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Default‬‬

‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪Copy, Paste, Undo,‬‬
‫‪Zoom.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Edit‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪Erase, Move, Rotate.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Command‬‬

‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﺗﻣﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ Polyline‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Object Snap‬‬

‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﻐﻁﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ shift‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ctrl‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻧﺷﺭﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪ v‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Hot Grips‬‬

‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪OLE‬‬

‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ‪ OLE ( Object Linking and Embedding‬ﺃﻱ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺿﻣﻳﻧﻬﺎ (‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Hyperlinks‬‬

‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻠﺣﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺗﺷﻌﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻭﻧﺳﺦ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪ Favorites‬ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻌﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪:Screen Menu‬‬

‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ‪:‬‬

‫‪Tools > Options > Display > Window Elements > Display Screen Menu‬‬
 ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ‪Text Window:‬‬

‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ 2F‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﻋﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Options:‬‬

‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ)ﺳﻧﺷﺭﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﻧﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎء ﷲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪Files, Display, Open and Save, Plotting, System, User Preferences, Drafting,‬‬
‫‪.Selection, Profiles‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺈﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Options‬ﻣﻥ‪ Tools > Options :‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ ‪ Default‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺭﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪Files‬‬

‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪ Menus‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Drivers‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ‬
‫‪ Support Files‬ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪Display‬‬

‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪Open and Save‬‬

‫ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻧﺗﻅﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﺳﺧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬

‫‪Plotting‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ،plotter‬ﻭﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪System‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪User Preferences‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪Drafting‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ‪ Autosnap‬ﻭ ‪Auto Tracking.‬‬

‫‪Selection‬‬

‫ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪Profiles‬‬

‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﻣﺅﻟﻔﻪ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﻪ‪.....‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺣﻘﻭﻗﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻛﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫‪Drawing Properties‬‬

‫‪§ File Þ Drawing Properties‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ DWGPROPS‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪Enter‬‬

‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing Properties‬ﻭﺑﻪ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬

 ‫‪General‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺟﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪Summary‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﺧﻳﺻﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻧﻪ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺅﻟﻔﻪ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﻪ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺗﺷﻌﺑﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪Statistics‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺻﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻪ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺥ ﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻙ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺿﻳﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Custom‬‬

‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ‪ Name‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ‪ ،Value‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻳﻧﺩﻭﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ‬

‫ﺳﻧﻧﺎﻗﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺱ‪:‬‬

‫§ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‬

‫§ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
 ‫§ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫§ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺽ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻓﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻭﻫﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ Alt‬ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺣﺗﻪ ﺧﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Draw‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ Line‬ﺳﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪:Specify first point‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪:[Specify next point or [Undo‬‬

‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺃﻣﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻻ ﺩﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ‪ Draw‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ‪ ،Circle‬ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪:[(Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪:[Specify radius of circle or [Diameter‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻭﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‪:‬‬

‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .Enter‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ‬
 ‫ﺑﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻸﻣﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ‪ Line‬ﻟﻪ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻑ ‪ .L‬ﻭﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪:[Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/Undo‬‬

‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﻧﺭﺳﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 20‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪command: C Þ Enter‬‬

‫‪ :[(CIRCLE Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬

‫‪Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <25.0000>: D &THORN; Enter‬‬

‫‪Specify diameter of circle <50.0000>: 20 &THORN; Enter‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ Circle‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ Pan‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺣﺭﻑ ) ' ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺣﺭﻓﻲ >> ﻗﺑﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻔﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪Command: C‬‬

‫‪CIRCLE Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 'PAN‬‬

‫‪.>>Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display shortcut menu‬‬

‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ Esc‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Enter‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﻟﻸﻣﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫‪Resuming CIRCLE command.‬‬

‫‪Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]:‬‬

‫‪Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <10.0000>: 10 &THORN; Enter‬‬

‫ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻣﺭ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺗﻪ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺻﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ Enter‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ Repeat‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﺭﺳﻣﺎ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫§ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪Open‬‬
‫‪§ File &THORN; Open‬‬
‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ OPEN‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ‪Enter‬‬
‫§ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Ctr + O‬ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬

‫ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Select File‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﺗﺣﻪ ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺭﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻩ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Open‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪ File Name‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪Open‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ Tools‬ﺛﻡ ‪ Find‬ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻘﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻﻥ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺟﺯء ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻭﺑﺄﺩﺍء ﺍﻓﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪Open‬‬
‫‪§ File &THORN; Open‬‬
‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ OPEN‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ‪Enter‬‬
‫§ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Ctr + O‬ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬

‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Select File‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Open‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Partial Open.‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ‪ Partial Open‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ Open‬ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺳﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻭﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻱ ﻟﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫§ ‪File &THORN; Partial Load‬‬
‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ PARTIALLOAD‬ﺛﻡ ‪Enter‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Partial Load‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Layers‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺳﻭﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﺳﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻧﺎ ً ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ً ﻭﻧﻭﻋﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻣﻛﻪ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ‪ Locking‬ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻝ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ‪ Default Layer‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ "‪ ."0‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ‪ Freeze‬ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ‪ Plotted‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ .Layer Properties Manager‬ﻭﻟﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Object Properties‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪Layer‬‬

‫‪§ Format &THORN; Layer‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪ LAYER‬ﺃﻭ ‪ LA‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ‪Enter‬‬

‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 11‬ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﻥ ﻫﻣﺎ ‪ Freeze In Current Viewport‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ Freeze In New Viewports‬ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭﺍﻥ ﺁﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﺎﺕ ‪.Layout‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ‪:Name‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻳﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻧﻘﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ MAXSORT‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺛﻡ ‪Enter.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ‪:On/Off‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺯﺩﺣﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺳﻧﻰ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻛﻝ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﺩﺓ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﺩﺓ ‪:Freeze/Thawed‬‬

‫ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻳﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺃﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺛﻼً ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ‪ Zoom‬ﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ‪ Pan‬ﻭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻘﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺅﻣﻧﺔ ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﻣﻧﺔ ‪:Locked/Unlocked‬‬

‫ﻳﻔﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ‪:Color‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺛﻡ ‪OK.‬‬

 ‫‪ v‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ‪:Linetype‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺧﻁ ﺑﺷﺭﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻣﺛﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ‪ Continuous‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ‪Linetype‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺛﻡ ‪ ،OK‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪ Load‬ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻛﺗﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻷﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ ،OK‬ﻭﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ‪Select Linetype.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ‪:Lineweight‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻁﺎ ً ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺧﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻭﻫﻛﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻣﺛﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ Default‬ــــــــ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ Lineweight‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ ،OK‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻁﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻘﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪:Plot Styles‬‬

‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻫﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ )ﻭﺳﻧﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎء ﷲ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﺎﺓ ‪ Named Plot Styles‬ﻭﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪Color Dependent Plot‬‬
‫‪Styles).‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ‪:Plot‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﺩ ‪ Plot‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ x‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﻙ ﻗﺭﺭﺕ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ v‬ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻱ ‪ Freeze In New Viewports‬ﻭ ‪ Freeze In Current Viewport‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻧﻧﺎﻗﺷﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻳﻊ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﻗﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﻌﻘﺩﺍً ﻭﻳﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺻﻣﻡ ﺭﺳﻣﺎ ً ﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ‪ Filter‬ﻳﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Named Layer Filters‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪Layer Properties‬‬
‫‪ Manager‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻙ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫§ ‪ :Show All Layers‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ‬

‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﻌﻘﺩﺍً ﻭﻳﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺻﻣﻡ ﺭﺳﻣﺎ ً ﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ‪ Filter‬ﻳﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Named Layer Filters‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪Layer Properties‬‬
‫‪ Manager‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻙ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫§ ‪ :Show All Layers‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫§ ‪ :Show All Used Layers‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫§ ‪ :Show All Xref Dependent Layers‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.External References‬‬

‫§ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪.Named Layer Filters‬‬
‫ﻭﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻭﺝ ﻓﻭﻗﻪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪Named Layer Filters.‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Filter Name‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺣﺭﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ )ﻣﺛﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺣﺭﻑ ‪ M‬ﺍﻛﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ ،(*M‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪.Layer Name‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ Add‬ﺛﻡ ‪.Close‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﺗﺟﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﻫﺫ ﺍ ﻗﺩ ﺍﺿﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Named Layer Filters‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪Layer Properties‬‬
‫‪ ، Manager‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎءﻩ ﻭﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻳﻖ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻧﺷﺎء ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ﻭﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺧﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻼ ﻭﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺭﺳﻣﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺑﻛﻝ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ‪ Export‬ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ )‪ (.las‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ‪ Import‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺻﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ،Layer Properties Manager‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺯﺭ ‪ .save state‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪ ،New Layer State Name‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﺷﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻭﺇﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻋﻪ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺗﻲ ‪ Layer States‬ﻭ ‪ ،Layer Properties‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﻭﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ،Manager Layer Properties‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ ،Restore State‬ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪Restore.‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﺗﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﺭ ‪ Edit‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﺔ ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻫﻭ ‪ Edit Layer State‬ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺯﺭ ‪ Rename‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ‪ Delete‬ﻓﻠﺣﺫﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Export‬ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Export Layer State‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ Save‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ‪ Import‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪ Import‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ‪ Import Layer State‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Open‬ﺳﺗﺟﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ،Layer States Manager‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪.Restore‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Grid‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Snap‬ﺗﻘﻳﺩ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺷﻌﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻡ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪:Grid‬‬

‫ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻳﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻏﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺗﺧﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪Grid‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪7F‬‬

‫§ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ Grid‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪:<10.0000> [Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect‬‬

‫ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ ON‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻭ ‪ OFF‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬

‫§ ‪Tools &THORN; Drafting Settings‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺭ ‪ DSETTINGS‬ﺍﻭ ‪ DS‬ﺛﻡ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ،Drafting Settings‬ﺍﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ Snap and Grid‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﺷﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Grid On‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Drafting Settings‬ﺍﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ‪:Snap‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻘﻔﺯ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻳﺱ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎً‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻧﺷﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪Snap‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪9F‬‬

‫§ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ Snap‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪:<10.0000> [Specify snap spacing or [ON/OFF/Aspect/Rotate/Style/Type‬‬

‫ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ ON‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻭ ‪ OFF‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ‬

‫§ ‪Tools &THORN; Drafting Settings‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻻﻭﺍﻣﺭ ‪ DSETTINGS‬ﺍﻭ ‪ DS‬ﺛﻡ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ،Drafting Settings‬ﺍﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ Snap and Grid‬ﺛﻡ ﻧﺷﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ Snap On‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Drafting Settings‬ﺍﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
 ‫ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ Snap‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ‪ Angle‬ﻭ ‪ Xbase‬ﻭ ‪ .Ybase‬ﻓﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪Angle‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﺗﻲ ‪ Xbase‬ﻭ ‪ Ybase‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﺍﻧﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺧﻼﻓﺎ ً ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻝ‬
‫‪ 0,0‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﻭﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ‪:Isometric Snap‬‬

‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﻭﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﺳﻭﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺣﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺧﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﻭﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻼً ﻓﻲ ﻓﺿﺎء ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻧﺷﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﻭﻣﺗﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ Snap and Grid‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪Drafting Settings‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪Grid On‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ Snap Type & Style‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Grid Snap‬ﺛﻡ ‪Isometric‬‬
‫‪.Snap‬‬

‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪OK‬‬

‫ﻓﺄﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﻭﻣﺗﺭﻱ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ‪ Top‬ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ‪ Right‬ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ‪ ،Left‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬
 ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ 5F‬ﺃﻭ ‪Ctrl+E.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ‪:Polar‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﻣﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻙ ﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﻣﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﻙ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻧﻘﻁ ﻳﻣﺗﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺏ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ‪:polar snap‬‬

‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ‪ snap‬ﻣﻧﺷﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪i. Tools &THORN; Drafting Settings‬‬

‫‪ .ii‬ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ Snap and Grid‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ Snap Type & Style‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪Polar Snap.‬‬

‫‪ .iii‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ Polar Spacing‬ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪Polar Distance‬‬

‫‪ .iv‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪OK‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ‪:Polar Tracking‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺳﻡ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻙ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺛﻼ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ o30‬ﻓﺈﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ،Drafting Settings‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ‪:‬‬

‫§ ‪Tools &THORN; Drafting Settings‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ‪ DSETTINGS‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DS‬ﺛﻡ ‪Enter‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ‪ Polar‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺎﺭ ‪Settings‬‬

‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ Drafting Settings‬ﺍﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪Polar Tracking.‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Polar Tracking On‬ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻧﺷﻁ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ Polar Angle Settings‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪.Increment Angle‬‬

‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺯﺭ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،Additional Angles‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،New‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ‪:Object Snaps‬‬

‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺿﻁﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬
 ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺩﺍﺛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻷﻱ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ،Drafting Settings‬ﻭﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Object Snap‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪Object Snap Settings‬‬

‫‪§ Tools &THORN; Drafting Settings‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ DSETTINGS‬ﺃﻭ ‪ OSNAP‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫§ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ‪ OSNAP‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺎﺭ ‪.Settings‬‬

‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ Object Snap‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ،Drafting Settings‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ Object Snap‬ﻧﺷﻁ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪.Object Snap On‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪.Osnap‬‬

‫§ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪.3F‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪Shift‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪:Endpoint‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ‪:Midpoint‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺳﻁ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺛﻠﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ‪: Intersection‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﻳﻥ ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ‪:Apparent Intersect‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻷﻱ ﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﻳﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻬﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﻁﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺑﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ‪:Extension‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﺧﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻭﺱ ﻭﺳﻳﺿﻳﻑ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ )‪ (+‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻟﻛﻲ ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺱ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ‪:Center‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻣﺳﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ‪:Quadrant‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻌﻳﺔ )‪ ( 270 ، 180 ، 90 ، 0‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺱ ‪:Tangent‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪:Perpendicular‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﻙ ﺯﺍﻭﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺳﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻱ ‪:Parallel‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻧﻘﻁ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺩﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ‪:Insert‬‬

‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻣﺔ ‪ attribute‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﻧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩﺓ ‪:Node‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺭﻱ ‪Divide‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ ،Measure‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﺇﻥ ﺷﺎء ﷲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ ‪:Nearest‬‬

‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍً ﻭﺃﻗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺳﻙ ﺑﺄﻗﺭﺏ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻼ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ‪:None‬‬

‫ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻼ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻛﺎﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺷﺭﺣﻧﺎﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪:AutoSnap‬‬

‫ﺗﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫"ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ" ﻳﺟﺫﺏ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪ Drafting‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.Options‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫§ ‪Tools &THORN; Options‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ‪ OPTIONS‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫§ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺻﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻣﺭ ‪.Options‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺳﺗﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ‪ AutoSnap‬ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬

‫§ ‪ :Marker‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫§ ‪ :Magnet‬ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﻳﻘﻔﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬

‫§ ‪ :Display AutoSnap Tooltip‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﺹ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺗﻠﻣﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪.‬‬

‫§ ‪ :Display AutoSnap Aperture Box‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺷﻌﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺷﻁﺎً‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺷﻌﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫§ ‪ :AutoSnap Marker Color‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬